‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﻬﺪﻱ ﻧﺼﺮ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﺍﻧﻲ‬

‫‪١‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ‪............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ‪...................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ‪..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ‪..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ‪...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﺕ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻭﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻥ‪.....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ‪..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻨﺮﻱ ﻭﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪..............................................................‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ‪.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ‪................................................................‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﺑﺎﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪..‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ‪.................................................................................. .....‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ‪......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ Alignment‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪..............................................‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‪..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎ ‪......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪.............................................Face & Round‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪............................... Two Face & Round‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪..................................Face-Face Distance‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪................................................................... Reverse‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ‪..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻤﻢ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ‪...............................................................................Alignment‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ‪................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ Alignment‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‪..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ‪........................................... Optalign‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ‪......................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﺍ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﻜﺮﺍﻥ ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﺘﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺗﺮﻗﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭙﻴﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ‪Alignment‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺪﻡ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻏﺎﻟﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻃﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ ﻧﻔﺖ ﺍﺻﻔﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺷﺘﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ Alignment‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ‪ Alignment‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺳﻌﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍ‪ ...‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻗﻀﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﺓ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺒﺮﺍﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻧﻈﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﺰﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍ‪...‬ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻭﻛﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩﻭﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺷﻮﺩﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻭﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻮﻟﻲ ‪ Alignment‬ﻗﺪﻣﻲ ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺩ ﺭﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻭﺭﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻡ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ ﻧﻔﺖ ﺍﺻﻔﻬﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺩﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﻥ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺎ ﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺎﻧﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪ ...‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻬﻤﻦ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪١٣٨١‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺪﻱ ﻧﺼﺮ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﺍ ﻧﻲ‬

‫‪٣‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﻭﺯﻣﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻼ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﯼ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻭّﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺔ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ,‬ﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ‪ ,‬ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪ ,‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﻭ… ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﯼ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﯼ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺣﻘﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺰﺍﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍ ﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﯽ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﮐﻮﭘﻠﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎﯼ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﯼ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﯼ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﺳﻔﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺴﻠﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﻢ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ) ﺣﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻴﻎ ﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﯼ ( ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻ ﹰ‬

‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﯽ ﺍ ﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺣﻮﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ) ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺺ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﹰﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ( ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍ ﻗﻌﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﺮﭘﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﯼ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻮﭘﻠﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ)ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ( ﺩﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺯﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ‪ Misalignment‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻥ)ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍ ﻓﻖ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﯼ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ)ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ( ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﯼ )‪ (Angularity‬ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﯼ )‪ (Offset‬ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﯼ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ) ﺷﮑﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﯼ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﯼ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻫﻢ ) ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ( ﺑﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺩﻋﺎ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ‪ ,‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍ ﻓﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Jack Bolt‬ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ) ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮﺭ ﻭ‪ ...‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ( ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﺓ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ) ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ‪(...‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﺯﻳﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪-۱‬ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﻭﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-۲‬ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎﮊﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﻋﻢ ﺍﺯﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻮﺑﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﮓ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻭ‪....‬‬
‫‪-۳‬ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻫﻮﺯﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫‪-۴‬ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ)‪(Spacer‬ﺑﺎﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬

‫‪٥‬‬
 ‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩﻛﻪ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦‬‬
 ‫ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﯼ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻣﺸﻜﻼﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺪﯼ‬
‫ﺭﻭﯼ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ‪ Misalignment‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺫﻳﻼ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‬

‫‪-١‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻤﻴﺪﻩ( ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﺎﺑﺎﻻﻧﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪﻭﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ)ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻛﻢ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ(ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ‪ Felexibility‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻤﻴﺪﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪﻭﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺧﻤﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧‬‬
 ‫‪-٢‬ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﻭﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺯﻭﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻭﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﺏ ﺑﻨﺪ)ﺭﺗﻮﺭﻱ( ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺍﺏ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺍﺏ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻢ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ)ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻩ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺍﺏ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪ 3000R.P.M‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺷﺒﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻧﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺪﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ)ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ(ﻭﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺍﺏ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺍﺏ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٣‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺭ ﻭﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻭﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺯﻭﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪-٤‬ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ)ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺺ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻨﺎﻗﻲ(ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭﺩﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪ Back Lush‬ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺮﻭﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺭﺱ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٥‬ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮔﺴﻴﺨﺘﮕﻲ ﻭﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﺣﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﻬﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ( ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٦‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺎ ﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻭﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻣﭙﺮ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ‪Steam‬ﺩﺭﺗﻮﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﻭﺩﺭﺻﻨﺎﻳﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٧‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬

‫‪٨‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺕ ﻭﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺎ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﻲ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﻲ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ‪ ,‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺎﺳﯽ )‪ (Base Plate‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﮐﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍ ﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ‪Foundation‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﻣﻪ ﻣﺴﻠﺢ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻛﻪ ﺍﺯﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﮑﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺷﮑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﻭ ﺗﺮﮎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻭّﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ)ﻭﺯﻥ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻭ‪ (....‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﯽ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﯼ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ )‪ (Anchor Bolt‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﻧﺴﻴﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧ ﹰﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﺎﺳﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺪ)ﻳﺎ ﺧﻤﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ(ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ )‪ (Anchor Bolt‬ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺻﻴﻘﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻨﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﻳﺰﯼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺳﯽ ) ‪(Base plate‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻓﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ)ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﮐﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺻﻠﺒﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺳﯽ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻠﺒﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﮑﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎﯼ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻴﻘﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﮐﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺶ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﺮﮔﻴﺞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻧﺸﻴﻤﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﺮﯼ ﭼﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﻳﺰﯼ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ )ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺒﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺁﻣﺪﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﯼ ﺭﻭﻱ‬

‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺎﺳﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭﺗﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺷﺎﺳﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﻴﺰﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ) ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ( ﮐﻪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﻻﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﭘﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺮﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﭘﻮﻛﺴﻲ ﮔﺮﻭﺕ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺷﺎﺳﯽ ﺭﺧﻨﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﻴﻤﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺸﻴﻤﻦ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎﯼ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﺕ ﺭﻳﺰﯼ ) ‪(Grouting‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﭘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭﻻ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﻭﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩیﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Epoxy Grout‬ﻭ – ‪Cement‬‬
‫‪Based Grout‬ﻫﺎﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺫﻳﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ – ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﯼ ‪ Epoxy Grout‬ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺋﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﻭﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻣﻲ ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻋﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻭ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺟﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﺧﻨﺪ)ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١١‬‬
 ‫‪ -٣‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﺪﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬﻭﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﻬﺎﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۵‬ﺿﺮِﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﻘﺒﺎﺽ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۶‬ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪ)‪ (Curing‬ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ – ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ‪ Epoxy Grout‬ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﻓﺎﺳﺪ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺑﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۵‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ,‬ﺗﺨﺼﺺ ﻭﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﭘﻮﻛﺴﻲ ﻫﺎﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺕ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺫﻳﻼ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ – ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﯼ ‪ Cement –Based Grout‬ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-۴‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻓﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۵‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ‪ Cement –Based Grout‬ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯﺍﭘﻮﻛﺴﻲ ﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﻠﺨﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ)ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﺧﻨﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺳﻴﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﻓﺴﺎﺩﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ )ﺩﻭﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۵‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﻘﺒﺎﺽ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﭘﻮﻛﺴﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ base plate‬ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

‫‪١٢‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ‬
‫‪-۱‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-۲‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻭﺕ ﺭﻳﺰﯼ ﻭ ﺧﺸﮏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ)‪ (Curing‬ﺍﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪-۳‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻓﻠﻨﭻ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-۴‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻓﻠﻨﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﻟـﻪ ﻫـﺎ ﺑـﺎ ﺳـﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫـﺎ ﻭ ‪Bracing‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﯼ) ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ( ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ )ﺭﺯﻭﻧﺎﻧﺲ( ﺩﺭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺳـﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫـﺎﯼ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺎﻣﺴﺎﻭﯼ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘـﺎﻝ ﻟـﺮﺯﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳـﻖ ﻟﻮﻟـﻪ ﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Pipe wave‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-۶‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻠﻨﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫‪-۷‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ‪ Expansion Joint‬ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸـﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-۸‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﻫـﺎﯼ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻠﻨﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0.002‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۹‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﻓﻠﻨﭻ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ)ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ( ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ‬

‫ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﮑﯽ ﻭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﮑﯽ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-۱‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻭ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﯼ )‪(Rod Hanger‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‪ ,‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻭ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺍﻥ (ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣیﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ )‪ (Supporting‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ)‪ (Hanger‬ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻓﻠﻨﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻛﻢ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻠﻨﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ)ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺴﻜﺖ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣‬‬
١٤
 ‫‪ -۲‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻨﺮﯼ ‪Spring Hanger & Support‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ ﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍیﻤﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ)ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‪,‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ(ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ)ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ( ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ)‪(Set‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺭﻭﯼ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻭﮔﺮﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٥‬‬
١٦
 ‫‪-١‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪Hot Set‬‬
‫‪Spring Hanger‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪.‬ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﺋﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ‪ ,‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻥ)ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪ Data Sheet‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﺪ(ﻓﻨﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭﮔﻮﺷﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﭘﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺮ ﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻫﻨﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻠﻨﭻ ﻟﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺑﺎ ﮐﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ ﻭ ﻓﻠﻨﭻ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻳﮏ ‪ Gasket‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻠﻨﭻ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩ)ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺮﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Hanger‬ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ( ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ)ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - ۲‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪Cold Set‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪).‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ( ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﯽ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻥ)ﻛﻪ ﺍ ﺯ‪ Data Sheet‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﺪ(ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﮔﯽ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ( ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﮔﯽ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻓﻨﺮ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎ( ﮐﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﮔﻮﺷﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ)ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ( ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ(ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ Hanger‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻓﻠﻨﭻ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺸﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ)ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﺩ( ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ)ﺑﺎ ﻛﻢ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺴﻜﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻠﻨﭻ ﻫﺎ( ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ‪ Spring Hanger‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ‪ Data sheet‬ﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻋﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﻬﺎﻭﻧﻴﺮﻭﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ)ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻭﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ( ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧‬‬
 ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪,‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻴﻎ ﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﯼ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﯼ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻏﻴﺮﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻧﺪ ) ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮﻧﺪ( ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺔ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ) ﺗﻴﻎ ﺍﺭﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭﯼ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ)ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ‪ Jack Bolt‬ﻫﺎﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ(ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺔ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻭﻟﺒﻪ ﺗﻴﻎ ﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ)ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ( ﮐﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻭﻻ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ)ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ(‪.‬‬

‫‪-٢‬ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺮ ﮔﻴﺞ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﺮ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻭ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻢ)ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ‪ Jack Bolt‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ(ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Gear Coupling‬ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ)ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻭﻝ(ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻭ ﻧﺦ‬
‫ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺘ ﹰﺎ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬ﻭﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺦ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﻟﻲ ﻫﺎ)ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻼ‬
‫ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﭘﻮﻟﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻭﭼﺮﺥ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺦ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭﭼﺮﺥ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ )‪ (Dial Gage‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۵‬ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﯼ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﯼ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﺮﺗﻮ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﯼ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﯽ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺳﺪﻩ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻭﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺳﻌﯽ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٠‬‬
 ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﺋﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻼ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﯼ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﺋﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﮐﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺋﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ)‪ (Plunger‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩﻭﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻱ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻨﺮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﮐﻴﺪﹰﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢١‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺒﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺫﻳﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻥ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪-١‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻤﺎﻧﺶ ﺩﺭﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪-٢‬ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪-٣‬ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ)ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻭ ‪(....‬‬
‫‪-٤‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫‪-٥‬ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫‪-٦‬ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ‬

‫‪٢٢‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪ Alignment‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻟﺒﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪a‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻔﻬﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﯼ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻧﻮﮎ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍ ﻟﻤﺮﮐﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ‪ ) B‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ (MB‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ R‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍ ﻟﻤﺮﮐﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ MA‬ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ (MB‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪)a‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ( ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻧﻮﮎ ﭘﻼﻧﭽﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪MA‬‬
‫‪MA=R-a‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ B‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ‪ ۱۸۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﭘﻼﻧﭽﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ A‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ R+a‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬ﭘﺲ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ (١٢‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ R-a‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ (٦‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ R+a‬ﺍﺳﺖ) ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﻛﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ ۲a‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻼﻧﭽﺮﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺎﯼ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Face & Round‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Two Face & Round‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Face – Face Distance‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Reverse‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺫﻳﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Face & Round‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ )‪ (Face‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﯼ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻟﺒﺔ‬
‫ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ) ‪ (Round‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﻨﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺟﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩﻛﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻥ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٤‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﯼ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Face & Round‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ) ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻟﻨﮓ ﮐﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﯽ( ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ‪(Spacer‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍ ﺳﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Reverse‬ﺭﺍﺣﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺩﺭﻙ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻥ)ﺗﺠﺴﻢ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ( ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ‪ Reverse‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Face & Round‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﺭﻭﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻤﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺻﺎﻓﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻭ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺩﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻳﻦ )ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ( ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻄﺢ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ)‪ (Face‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻛﻨﺪﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻭ ‪ .Face‬ﻭﻳﻚ ‪Round‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻳﺎﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫‪ Reverse‬ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Reverse‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Two Face & Round‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻗﻴﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺠﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ)‪ (Face‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ ۱۸۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪Face‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٥‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Face – Face Distance‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹲﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ )‪(Spool‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﻮﭘﻠﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻨﮏ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ (‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﻭﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٦‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﯼ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Face –Face Distance‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ)ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﺮ( ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ) ‪ (Spool‬ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Face- Face Distance‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻳﺎ ‪ Spool‬ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﮐﺎﺭﺁﻳﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻳﯽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺥ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ‪ Spool‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Reverse‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﯼ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٧‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﯼ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Reverse‬‬
‫‪-١‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺻﺎﻓﯽ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﺎﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٢‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮑﺎﭘﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻏﻨﮑﺎﺭﯼ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﻼﻭﺓ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ Hot Align‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﯼ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﯼ )‪ (Angularity‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻄﺢ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - ٦‬ﺧﻴﺰ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ )‪ (Bracket Sagment‬ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻄﺢ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Reverse‬‬
‫‪-۱‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﯼ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪-۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻼ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺨﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻ ﹲ‬
‫‪-٣‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ ﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Face & Round‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮ ﻭﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-۴‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﮐﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺧﻴﺰ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎ ﺍ ﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ‪Prealignment‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺕ‪ ,‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﻪ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍ ﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺑﻌـﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗـﺮﻙ ﻧﺪﺍﺷـﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﻣـﻮﻥ ﻧﺒـﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺑﺘـﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ )‪ (Base plate‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻦ ﺻـﻠﺒﻴﺖ ﻛـﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﭽﻴـﺪﮔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴـﻄﺢ ﺑـﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻴﻤﻦ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭﭘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ )ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻬـﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻥ(‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﻠـﻨﺞ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ )ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﮔﺴﻜﺖ( ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍ ﻧﺤـﺮﺍ ﻓـﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻫﺎ )ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ ﻧﺼـﺐ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0.003‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸـﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠـﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻋـﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﻟـﻪ ﻛﺸـﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ )‪ (Cooling‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ Lube Oil‬ﻭ ‪ Seal Oil‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴـﺮﻱ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Base plate‬ﺗﻤﻴـﺰ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ ﺷـﻴﻤﺰﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ )ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﻭ ﺁﺯﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ‪Jack Bolt‬ﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﭘﻴﭻ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﻤﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺟﻨﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣـﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑـﻞ ﺯﻧـﮓ ﺯﺩﮔـﻲ ﻭ ﺧـﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٧‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻨﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﺯﺍﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ -٨‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪,‬ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗـﺎﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻥ‪,‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﺮﻧﺲ ﻳﺎﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻬﺎ )ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ( ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ,‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺏ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ,‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﻳﺸﻲ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﻔـﺘﻦ ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺴـﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺐ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺷـﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٩‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻭ … ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛـﻢ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪-۱۰‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻋﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ‪ ,‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ )ﺗـﻮﺭﻙ ﻣﺘـﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻣﺘﺮ( ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﻤﺰﺑﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺁﭼﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ(‬
‫‪-۱۱‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ )ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﻔﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺭﻙ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪Jack Bolt‬ﻫﺎ( ﻭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎ ﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﭼﻜﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭ‪......‬‬

‫‪٢٩‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪Prealignment‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻠﻮ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯﺍﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺩﻗﺖ ﭼﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻜـﻢ ﺑﺴـﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤـﻮﺩ ﺑـﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ‪,‬ﺍﺯﺍﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻥ )ﮔﻴﺮ ﻧﺪﺍﺷـﺘﻦ( ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ‪ ......‬ﭼﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ,‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴـﺖ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪٣‬ﻭ‪٦‬ﻭ‪ ٩‬ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺟﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪٣‬ﻭ‪ ٩‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ )ﻳﺎ ﺍﺧـﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻥ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﻛـﻢ (ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮ ﻣﺸـﻜﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪-٢‬ﭼﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ )‪(Braket Segment‬‬

‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ )ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺺ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮ ﺑـﺰﺭﮒ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ( ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻫﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﺧﻤﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻧﻴـﺮﻭﻱ ﺟﺎﺫﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ )ﻭﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪١٢‬ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ(ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻴﺰ)‪ (Sag‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺰﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎ ﺳﺒﺎﺕ ‪ .Alignment‬ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﻭﻻ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ )ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ (٦‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧـﺪﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ) ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺟﺒـﺮﻱ ﻋـﺪﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧـﺪﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﻗـﺎﺋﻢ )ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﻭ ‪ (٦‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺍﻓﻘـﻲ )‪ ٣‬ﻭ ‪(٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻫـﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺧﻴﺰ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ )ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Reverse‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪ (.‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺣﺸﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ)ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ( ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺋـﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﻳـﺪ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻧـﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻼ ﺻﻠﺐ‪ ,‬ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮﻱ ﻭﻣﺸـﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺻﻠﺐ)‪ (Mandrel‬ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﺋـﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﺤـﺮﻙ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴـﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃـﻪ ﺑﺴـﺘﻪ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩﻭ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴـﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ)‪ (Mandrel‬ﻭ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺑـﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴـﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﻭ ‪ ١٢‬ﺻـﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﭼـﺮﺧﺶ ﻣـﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨـﺪ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ‪ a‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ‪a(١٢) = +0.12 0‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ b‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‬
‫‪ b (6 )=+0.120‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓـﻮﻕ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮﻱ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ‪0.010‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻴـﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻳﻜﺴـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﻴـﺮﻳﻢ( ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌـﻲ ﺍﻧﺤـﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ‪ a‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻨﭻ ‪+0.120-‬‬
‫‪ +0.120+0.010=+0.130‬ﺍﻳـﻨﭻ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻋـﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺒﻠـﻲ ﻛـﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‬ ‫‪ 0.010=0.110‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪b‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٢‬‬
 ‫‪ -٣‬ﭼﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﺿـﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ ﻫـﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻟﺒـﻪ ﻫـﺎ )‪ (Round‬ﻭ ﺳـﻄﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ )‪ (Face‬ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﭼﻚ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣﻴـﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﻫـﺎ ﻱ ﺗـﺎ ‪ 1500‬ﺣـﺪ ﺍﻛﺜـﺮ ‪ 0.004‬ﺍﻳـﻨﭻ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 0.002‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ (ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺻـﻼﺣﻲ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﭽﻨـﻴﻦ ﻧﻘـﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺧﻤﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻟـﺰﻭﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫـﺎ ﺻـﺎﻑ )‪ (True‬ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٤‬ﭼﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻟﻘﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ )‪(Soft Foot‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ )ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤـﻞ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ)‪ ( Base plate‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ )ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ(‬
‫ﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻧ ً‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻟﻘﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ)‪ (Soft Foot‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٣‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪Soft Foot‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪Padstall‬ﻳﺎ‪ Base plate‬ﻟﻘﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪) Parallel Soft Foot-١‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫‪)Angular Soft -٢‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ‪pad Stall‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫‪) Twist Soft Foot-٣‬ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﮕﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻥ (‬
‫‪)Induced Soft Foot-٤‬ﻟﻘﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Induced Soft Foot‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺑـﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫـﺎ ﻳـﺎ ﺗـﻨﺶ ﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )‪ (Deformation‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ‪ Soft Foot‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣـﻴﻦ ﺭﻳﺨﺘـﻪ ﮔـﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺳـﺎﺧﺖ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﻛﻒ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻧﺎﺻﺎﻑ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ‪ Base Plate‬ﻭ ‪ Pad Stall‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﭘﻮﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ‪,‬ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮔـﺮﻭﺕ‪ ,‬ﻣﺴـﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ‪ ,‬ﺧﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺕ‪ ,‬ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‪ ,‬ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺯﻳﺮﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ‪.....‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻛﺜﺎ ﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﮔﺮﺩﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﻔﻨﺞ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﻴﺰﻫﺎ‪,‬ﻧﺎﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪ ,‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻌـﺪﺍﺩ‪ ,‬ﻓﻨﺮﻳـﺖ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻦ) ﺑـﻪ ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻨﺲ ﻧﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ (ﻭ‪........‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫـﺎ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﺑﺎﻋـﺚ ﻟﻘـﻲ ﭘﺎﻳـﻪ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺑﺬﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪Soft Foot‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻭ ‪ Deformation‬ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٢‬ﺧﻤﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٣‬ﺑﻬﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ Center Line‬ﻫﻮﺯﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ )ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠـﻲ(ﻭﺧـﺮﺍ ﺑـﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺭﺱ ﻳﺎﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺪﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٤‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ )‪ (Air Gap‬ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺭﺗـﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫـﺎ )ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘـﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ( ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٥‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ Alignment‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋـﺚ ﮔـﻴﺞ ﺷـﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ‪Soft Foot‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ )ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻚ ﺗﻚ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺮ ﮔﻴﺞ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻭ ‪Pad Stall‬ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷـﻴﻤﺰ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Base Plate‬ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﻴـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﻧﻘـﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺸﻴﻤﻦ ﮔـﺎﻩ ﺷـﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﺎﺳـﻲ )ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘـﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ( ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Soft Foot‬ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺿـﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺐ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﮔﺎﻫ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺎﺷـﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ Soft Foot‬ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﭽﻴـﺪﻩ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺗﻌـﻮﻳﺾ ‪ Base plate‬ﺗﻌـﻮﻳﺾ ‪Pad‬‬
‫‪ stall‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻻ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺎﺷـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﻭﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺍﻛﺜﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟـﻊ ﺫﻳﺼـﻼﺡ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ Soft Foot‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0.002 -0.003‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٥‬‬
 ‫‪ -٥‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﺮﻧﺲ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﺮﻧﺲ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻮﺷﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪ (Sleeve Bearing‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﻴﻦ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑـﺎﻻ )ﺑﺼـﻮﺭﺕ ﺧـﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺯﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ( ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺣﻴﻦ ‪ Alignment‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗـﻲ ﺩﺭﺻـﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﭘﻠـﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤـﺎ“ ﺍﺯﻳـﻚ ﻧـﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎﻥ )ﻏﻠﺘﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻐﺰﺷﻲ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﺎﺳﻔﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻼ ﻧﻴﺰﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣـﻴﻦ ﻧﺼـﺐ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺩﻭﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻫﻢ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻨﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻓﻖ )ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ( ﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺍﻭﻻ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴـﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ Base Plate‬ﻭﭼﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ)ﺗﺮﺍﺯﻛﺮﺩﻥ( ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴـﺮﻱ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ )‪(Pad Stall‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﻣﺸـﺎﺑﻪ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻘـﻂ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻛـﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛـﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺎﺷـﻴﻦ ﺑـﺎ ﺷـﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Jack Bolt‬ﻫﺎ ﻣﺒﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﻗـﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻻﺯﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﺳـﻔﺖ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Jack Bolt‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑـﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮﭘﺎﻳـﻪ ﻫـﺎ ﺑـﺎ ﻣﺸـﻜﻞ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻄﺎﻳﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ)ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺷـﻴﻤﺰ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺐ ﻧﺒﺎﺷـﺪ(ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺎﺕ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ“ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻓـﻖ )ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ (٩‬ﺑـﺎ ﺩﻗـﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ Alignment‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ)ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ( ﺩﺭﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻓـﻖ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻓـﻖ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺩﻭﺑـﺎﺭﻩ ﭼـﻚ ﻭﺗﺼـﺤﻴﺢ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭﺟﻬـﺖ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ Alignment‬ﺩﺭﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ‪ ,‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻫـﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺳـﺎﺯﻱ ﺑـﺎﻻﺧﺺ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺎﺷـﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺳـﻨﮕﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﭘﺮﺩﺭﺩﺳﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺷﻤﻴﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺷـﻤﻴﺰﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳـﻌﻲ ﻭﺧﻄـﺎ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ‬

‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻣﺪﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭﻧـﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺍﻧـﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺘﻦ ﺍﺻـﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺎﺳـﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﺮﻛـﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫـﺎ )ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮ(ﺩﺭﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺭﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺷﻨﺎﺳـﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺭﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻮﺿـﻴﺢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ ( y‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-١‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ (x‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺁﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻥ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺳـﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭﺑـﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﺳـﺒﻪ ﻣﻴـﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓــﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺧــﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫــﺮ ﻣــﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻــﻔﺤﻪ)ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤــﻮﺭ ﺍﻓــﻖ ( ﻗــﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺘــﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ)ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺧﻂ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍ ﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Face‬‬
‫‪ & Round‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٢‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺍﮔــﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴــﺖ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄــﻪ ﺍﺯﻳــﻚ ﺧــﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺻــﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼــﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠــﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﺑــﺎ ﺍﺗﺼــﺎﻝ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﻧﻘــﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘـﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻴـﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤـﺮﺍﻑ ﺗـﻚ ﺗـﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻃﺪﻳﮕﺮﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪x‬ﻫﺎ( ﻧﻴـﺰ ﺑﺪﺳـﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ ﻣﻴـﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺎﺑﺠـﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺍﺯﻣﺢ ﻭﺭ‪x‬ﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﺧﻄﺨﻂ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻳـﺎ ﻗـﺎﺋﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎ“ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ )ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻳـﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫‪ Reverse‬ﺑﺮﺍ ﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎ)ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ( ﻣﻔﻬـﻮﻡ ﺍﻋـﺪﺍﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎ ﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫـﺎ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳـﻪ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ)ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ( ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑـﺖ)ﭘﻤـﭗ( ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ)ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪x‬ﻫﺎ( ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺗﻮﺿـﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎ ﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻳـﻖ ﻧﺼـﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻛﺎ ﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ )‪ (Round‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ)‪. (Face‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪Face‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ )‪ (Face‬ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺴـﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺩﻫﻨﻪ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ )ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪١٢‬ﻭ‪ (٦‬ﺩﺭﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﻳﺎ ) ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ (٦‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪٦‬ﻣﺜﻼﻋـﺪﺩ‪- 0.020‬ﺍﻳـﻨﭻ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ ﺩﻫـﺪ ﻣﺒـﻴﻦ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎ ﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑـﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ ﻫﺎﺑـﻪ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ 0.020‬ﺍﻳـﻨﭻ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ( ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻛﺎ ﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺩﻫﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ)ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ٨‬ﺍﺳﺖ(‪.‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ + 0.020‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻭﺿـﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ٧‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‪Round‬‬
‫ﺑــﺎ ﺗﻮﺟــﻪ ﺑــﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜــﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤــﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫــﺎﻱ ﺍﻻﻳــﻦ ﻫﻤــﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻳﻜــﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳــﺎ ﻋــﺖ ﻫــﺎﻱ ﺍﻧــﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴــﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫‪Round‬ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻭﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻔﻬﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷـﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤـﺮﻙ)ﺍﻟﻜﺘـﺮﻭ ﻣﻮﺗـﻮﺭ( ﺑﺴـﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ)ﭘﻤﭗ( ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ)ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭙـﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﻣﺤﻮﺭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ) ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ( ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ‪ -0.020‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬

‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ( ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪0.020‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ)ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷـﻜﻞ ﻓـﻮﻕ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺘـﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤـﺮﻙ ﺩﺭﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ) ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳـﻪ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ)ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ( ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤـﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ﺗﻘـﺎﺭﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻣﺘـﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ﺗﻘـﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑـﺖ) ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴـﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ( ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﺿﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﺻﻔﺮﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ + 0.020‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺗﻘـﺎﺭﻥ‬
‫‪0.020‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ )ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ( ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ)ﭘﻤﭗ( ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ﺗﻘـﺎﺭﻥ ﺷـﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Reverse‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Face-Round‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫـﺮ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴـﺖ ﻫـﺎﻱ ‪ ١٢‬ﻭ‪) ٦‬ﻳـﺎ‬
‫‪٣‬ﻭ‪ (٩‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪) ١٢‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ( ﻋﺪﺩﺧﻮﺍﻧـﺪﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻣﺜﺒـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺳـﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻃـﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﺘﻈـﻴﻢ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ)ﭘﻼﻧﺠـﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﺩ( ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ﺟـﺎﻡ ﻧﻜﻨﻨـﺪ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻮﺭﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٩‬‬
 ‫ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Face & Round‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩ ﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﺑـﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴـﺐ ‪ R=-0.020‬ﻭ ‪ F=-0.020‬ﺍﻳـﻨﭻ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ )‪(F‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ) ﻭﺿـﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ‪٨‬ﺍﺳﺖ(ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘـﺲ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﻴـﺮﻳﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺷـﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ)ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ( ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ‪ α‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫=‪) Tanα‬ﻛﻪ‪ D‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄـﺮ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‪α‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻧﮋﺍﻧﺖ ﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳـﻪ‬
‫)‪(α‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ IB‬ﻭ ‪ OB‬ﺑـﻪ ﺳـﻤﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﮔﺮﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬـﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻥ)ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ (o‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻛﻨﺪﺯﺍﻭﻳـﻪ ‪ α‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ ﻭﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺷـﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺘﺤـﺮﻙ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ )ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪0.010‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺩﻭﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛـﺎﻣﻼ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﻧﮋﺍﻧﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ α‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪F‬‬
‫= ‪Tan α‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺯﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻭﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺗﺎﻧﮋﺍﻧﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪IB‬‬
‫= ‪Tan α‬‬
‫‪B+C‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪OB‬‬
‫= ‪Tan α‬‬
‫‪A+ B+C‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪IB‬‬ ‫‪B+C‬‬

‫= ‪Tan α‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫(* ‪IB = F‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫)‪( ١‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪OB‬‬ ‫‪A+ B+C‬‬
‫= = ‪Tan α‬‬ ‫(* ‪OB = F‬‬ ‫‪) (٢‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪A+ B‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ α‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻔﺮ ﺑﺮﺳـﺪ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ )o‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑـﺖ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠـﻮ ﻭﻋﻘـﺐ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ IB‬ﻭ ‪ OB‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻀـﻴﻪ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﭘﺎﻳـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺟﻠـﻮ‬

‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ IB‬ﻭ ‪ OB‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳـﻪ ‪ α‬ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺮ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﺳـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ α‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﻭﺭﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ“ﻣﺸـﺨﺺ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ )‪ (١‬ﻭ)‪ (٢‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﻣﺤﻮﺭ)ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧـﺎﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ( ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﭘﺎﻳـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺟﻠـﻮ‪ IB‬ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺐ ‪ OB‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻮﻕ( ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭﻋﻘﺐ ﺷﻤﻴﺰﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﺗﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳـﻪ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫)ﺟﻤﻊ ﺟﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﻋـﺪﺍﺩ(ﺯﻳـﺮ‬ ‫‪ α‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ) ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ )‪ (١‬ﻭ)‪ (٢‬ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪B+C‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫(‪IB=( ± )F‬‬ ‫) ‪)( ±‬‬ ‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪A+ B+C‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫(‪OB (=( ± ) F‬‬ ‫) ‪)( ±‬‬ ‫)‪( ٤‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ (Face‬ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤـﺮﻙ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺷـﺎﻣﻞ ﭼﻬـﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻛﻠـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ x‬ﻫﺎ) ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻳﺎﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ )‪ (٣‬ﻭ )‪ (٤‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ)ﻫﺮﺩﻭﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮﺩﻭﻣﻨﻔﻲ(‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷــﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺳــﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑــﺖ ﻧﺼــﺐ ﺷــﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮﺳــﺎﻋﺖ ﻫــﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨــﮓ ﻣﺎﺷــﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤــﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ )‪( ٩‬ﻭ)‪ (١٠‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗـﺎ ﻧـﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮﺑﺮﺳﺪﻭﺩﻭﻣﺤﻮﺭﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ‪ Face‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻗﺴـﻤﺖ ﭘﺸـﺖ‬

‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﺯﻧﻈـﺮ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻋـﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺒﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻨﺪﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ :‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﻭﺍﺑـﻂ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍ ﻓﻖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ‪ D :‬ﻗﻄﺮﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ‪ Face‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ) ﺩﻭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﻮﻙ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ)ﻭ ﭘﻤﭗ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﻫـﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻـﻔﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ ﻭﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ٦‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ R=+0.030 , F= +0.020‬ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌـﺎﺩ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ A=100Cm‬ﻭ ‪ B=40Cm‬ﻭ ‪ C=20Cm‬ﻭ ‪ D=20Cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺮﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ(‬

‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘـﺎﺭﻥ ﺷـﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗـﻮﺭ ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﻫـﻢ ﺑﺼـﻮﺭﺕ )‪(٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺮﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ )ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ α‬ﺩﺭﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ)ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺯﻳﺮﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺷﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ )‪ (٩‬ﻭ)‪ (١٠‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ‪R‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ)ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ(ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻭﺿـﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ ﻫـﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺑـﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﮔـﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ‪ F‬ﻭ ‪)R‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﻗـﺪﺭﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻬﺎ( ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪B+C‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪40 + 20‬‬ ‫‪0.030‬‬

‫( ‪IB = +F‬‬ ‫( ‪)- = +0.020‬‬ ‫‪)-‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪A+ B+C‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪100 + 40 + 20‬‬ ‫‪0.030‬‬

‫(‪OB = +F‬‬ ‫(‪) - = +0.020‬‬ ‫‪)-‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪IB = +0.060 -0.0 15 = +0.045‬‬

‫‪OB=+0.160-0.015=+0.145‬‬

‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺑـﻪ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ 0.045‬ﺍﻳـﻨﭻ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮﭘﺎﻳـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻋﻘـﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ 0.145‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ)ﺍﻻﻳﻦ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ )ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻧـﺪﻩ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ( ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ)‪ (…, D ,C ,B ,A‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤـﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳـﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻭ …ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺎﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻬﺎ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺧـﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻴـﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﻴﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﺍﺯﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﻴﺰﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺜﺒـﺖ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﻴﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫*‪ F‬ﻓﻘـﻂ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳـﻪ ﻫﺎﺷـﻴﻤﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ‪:‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑـﺮﺩﻭﺩﻭ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫* ‪ 0.020‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 0.100‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑـﻪ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﭘﺎﻳـﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎ ﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﮔﺮﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﻛﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣـﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻣﻮ ﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ R=-0.040 , F= +0.030‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻـﻞ ‪ B=40Cm ,A=100 Cm, D=20Cm, C=10Cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺴـﺖ ﺗﻌﻴـﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺷـﻤﻴﺰﻱ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺯﻳﺮﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺑـﺎﻫﻢ ﺍﻻﻳـﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﻧـﺪ)ﺿـﻤﻨﺎﺧﻴﺰ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ‪Round‬‬
‫‪0.010‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺰﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪0.010‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ Round‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭﻱ ﻭﺧﻴـﺰ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ‪R= (-0.040+0.010)= -0.030‬ﺍﻳﻨﺞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ )‪ (10) ,(9‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮﺑﺎﻳﺪﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪B+C‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪40 + 10 0.030‬‬

‫( ‪IB = - F‬‬ ‫(*‪)+ = -0.030‬‬ ‫‪)+‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪A+ B+C R‬‬ ‫‪100 + 40 + 10 0.030‬‬
‫(‪OB= -F‬‬ ‫(*‪)+ = -0.030‬‬ ‫‪)+‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪IB = -0.075+0.010=--0.065‬‬

‫‪OB= -0.225+0.010 = -0.215‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ‪ 0.065‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺷﻴﻤﺰﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‪ 0.215‬ﺍﻳﻨﺞ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ‪,‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٧‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Two Face& Round‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Face & Round‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺷـﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛـﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴـﺖ ﻫـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ)ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ( ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩﺧﻄﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮ ‪Face‬‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ Face‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭﻱ ﺷـﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ(ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎ ﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﺑـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺷـﺎ ﻓـﺖ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻭﺯﻳـﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪﺑﺎﻻﺧﺺ ﭼـﺮﺥ ﺩﻧـﺪﻩ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺟﻨـﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻣﻜـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﻴﺴﺖ(ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ‪ Two Face & Round‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫‪ Face‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﻚ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮﻫﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ‪ Round‬ﻭﭼـﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﻃـﻮﻟﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫـﺮ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻋـﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋـﺖ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳـﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﻫـﺎ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ Face‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ F1‬ﻭ ‪R‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﻋـﺪﺩ‪ F6= -0.030‬ﻭ ‪ R= -0.030‬ﻭﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ‪ F2‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﻋﺪﺩ‪ F12= -0.040‬ﺍﻳـﻨﭻ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲ ﺩﻫـﺪﺍﮔﺮﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴـﺐ ‪D.=20Cm C=20Cm , B=40Cm ,A=100Cm‬ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻣﻄﻠـﻮﺏ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣﻴـﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻙ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻭ ﻛﻢ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺩﺭﻫﺮﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ )ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (٦‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ ﻫـﺎ‬
‫)‪(Face‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺭﺍﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴـﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺭﺩﺭﺍﻣـﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴـﻴﻢ‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪(١٢‬ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ)ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ‪ (٦‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧـﺪﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﺍﺯﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻧﺼﻒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Face‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪F12 − F6‬‬
‫= ‪F12‬‬ ‫‪ Face‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻭ‪:‬‬

‫‪٤٨‬‬
 ‫)‪− 0.040 − (−0.030‬‬
‫= ‪F12‬‬ ‫‪=-0.005‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ Face‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ)‪ (-0.005‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ 0.030‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ 0.005‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻭﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ Face‬ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬
‫)‪− 0.030 − (−0.040‬‬
‫=‪F6‬‬ ‫‪= +0.005‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻛـﺎﻣﻼ“ﻳﻜﺴـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ‪ R=-0.030‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ )‪ (10) , (9‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ)ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪B+C‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪40 + 20‬‬ ‫‪0.030‬‬

‫(‪IB =+F‬‬ ‫(*‪) + = +0.050‬‬ ‫‪)+‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪A+ B+C‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪100 + 40 + 20‬‬ ‫‪0.030‬‬
‫(‪OB = +F‬‬ ‫(*‪) + + = +0.005‬‬ ‫‪)+‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪٤٩‬‬
 ‫ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪IB=+0.015 +0.015=+0.030‬‬

‫‪OB=+0.040 +0.015= +0.055‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ 0.030‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ ‪ 0.055‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳـﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ)ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ( ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٠‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪FACE- FACE DISTANCE‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻛــﻪ ﻗــﺒﻼ“ ﻧﻴﺰﺍﺷــﺎﺭﻩ ﺷــﺪ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑــﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻴﻜــﻪ ﻓﺎﺻــﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳــﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺑﺎﺷــﺪ )ﻣﺜــﻞ‬
‫‪ Spool‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ (ﻣﻮﺭﺩﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬ﻭﺍﺳـﺎﺱ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺍﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫‪ Face & Round‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﺑﻠﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑـﺎﻛﺲ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﭙﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﻫـﻢ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺑﺘـﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓـﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳـﻪ ﺍﻱ )‪ (Face‬ﻭ ﻣـﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻧﺒـﻮﺩﻥ ‪ Round‬ﺑـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻭﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﺗﺼـﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻭﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﺎﻣﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻮﺷـﺎﻧﺪﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺫﻳﻼ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺤــﻮﺭ ﺗﻘــﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﺳــﭙﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑــﻪ ﻋﻨــﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤــﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑــﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈــﺮ ﻣــﻲ ﮔﻴــﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ)ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻭﻫﻢ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﻴـﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺳـﭙﺲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋـﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗـﻮﺭﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ )ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﺭﺁﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ( ﺑﺎﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺟﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﺳـﺖ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﻣﺮﺣﻠـﻪ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗـﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻔﻬﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺻـﻔﺮ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴـﺖ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥١‬‬
 ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻭﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻭﺳـﭙﺲ ﺍﻻﻳـﻦ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫‪40 + 10‬‬ ‫‪0.030‬‬

‫(*‪IB =0.010‬‬ ‫‪)-‬‬ ‫‪= +0.025-0.015=+0.010‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪80 + 40 + 10 0.030‬‬
‫(*‪OB=0.010‬‬ ‫‪)-‬‬ ‫‪= +0.065-0.015=+0.050‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﻴﺰﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ‪ Spool‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺿـﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨـﮓ ﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫‪40 + 10 + 300‬‬ ‫‪0.060‬‬

‫(*‪IB=+0.005‬‬ ‫‪)-‬‬ ‫‪= +0.0 875 -0.030= +0.0575‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪80 + 40 + 10 + 300‬‬ ‫‪0.060‬‬
‫(*‪OB=+0.005‬‬ ‫‪)-‬‬ ‫‪=0.1075-0.030= +0.0775‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪٥٢‬‬
 ‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺷﻤﻴﺰﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻴﺎﺯﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗـﻮﺭ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﻫـﻢ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫‪IB=+0.10+0.057=0.067‬‬

‫‪OB=+0.050+0.077=0.127‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺭﺍﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻥ ﻫـﻢ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬

‫‪40 + 10‬‬ ‫‪0.030‬‬

‫( * ‪IB = +0.010‬‬ ‫‪)-‬‬ ‫‪= +0.025 – 0.015 = +0.010‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪80 + 40 + 10‬‬ ‫‪0.030‬‬
‫( * ‪OB=+0.010‬‬ ‫‪)-‬‬ ‫‪= +0.065 – 0.015 = +0.050‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬

‫‪40 + 10‬‬ ‫‪0.060‬‬

‫( * ‪IB = +0.005‬‬ ‫‪)+‬‬ ‫‪= +0.0125+ 0.015 = +0.0425‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪60 + 40 + 10‬‬ ‫‪0.060‬‬
‫( * ‪OB = +0.005‬‬ ‫‪)+‬‬ ‫‪= +0.0275 + 0.030 = +0.0575‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ Flexible‬ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺳـﭙﻮﻝ ﻫﻤﻴﺸـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛـﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﺴـﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻴﺰﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)‪ (Segment‬ﻋﻤـﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻮ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺭﺍﺗﻮﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺫﻛﺮﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﭽﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪ Alignment‬ﺻـﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Face& Round‬ﺑـﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﺮﺳـﻴﻤﻲ ﻛﻤـﻲ ﻣﺸـﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻭﻗـﺖ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﺍﺯﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪REVERSE‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Reverse‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻋــﺪﺩ ﺳــﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧــﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴــﺮ ﻛــﻪ ﺑ ـﻪ ﺻــﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳــﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻟﺒــﻪ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨــﮓ ﻫــﺎ‬
‫)‪(Round‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺷـﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤـﺮﻙ ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ﺗﻘـﺎﺭﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫـﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺷـﺪﻥ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﺩﺭﻳـﻚ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺮ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﻨﺪ )ﻣـﺜﻼ“ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴـﺖ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓـﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﻫـﺎ ﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤـﺮﻙ ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻣﺘـﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ﺗﻘـﺎﺭﻥ ﻣﺎﺷـﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑـﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳـﺖ)‪ (a/2‬ﻭ ﻋـﺪﺩﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﺳـﻤﺖ ﭼﭙـﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻣﺎﺷـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﭘﻤـﭗ ﺍﺳـﺖ )‪ (b/2‬ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﺗﺼـﺎﻝ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧﻘـﺎﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳـﻪ ﺍﻧﺤـﺮﺍﻑ‬

‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ)ﺯﺍﻭﻳـﻪ ‪ ( α‬ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘـﺎ“ ﻣﻴـﺰﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺟﻬـﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺎﻧﮋﺍﻧﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ α‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪a−b‬‬
‫= ‪Tan α‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪2C‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺯﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪:‬‬

‫'‪IB‬‬
‫= ‪Tan α‬‬
‫‪B+C‬‬
‫'‪OB‬‬
‫= ‪Tan α‬‬
‫‪A+ B+C‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪a −b‬‬ ‫‪B+C‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫= ‪IB‬‬ ‫(*‬ ‫)‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫‪a−b‬‬ ‫‪A+ B+C‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬ ‫= ‪OB‬‬ ‫(*‬ ‫)‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪) O‬ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻛـﺎﻣﻼ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﺍﺳـﺖ ( ﺩﺭﺟﻬـﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧـﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳـﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪(Angular‬‬
‫)‪ Misalignment‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪b/2‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﻛـﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻶ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Reverse‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫‪a −b‬‬ ‫‪B+C‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬

‫( ‪IB = ±‬‬ ‫(* )‬ ‫‪)±‬‬ ‫) ‪(٣‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪a−b‬‬ ‫‪A+ B+C‬‬

‫( ‪OB= ±‬‬ ‫(* )‬ ‫‪)± b‬‬ ‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ‪ OB, IB‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﺳـﺖ)ﺑﺴـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‪ a‬ﻭ‪ b‬ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪١٢‬ﻭ‪ ٦‬ﻳﺎ‪٣‬ﻭ‪ ٩‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ( ﻭ ﻣﺜـﻞ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Face & Round‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬

‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺫﻫﻦ ﻣﺤﺴـﻢ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭﺗﺸـﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﻭﺿـﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﺪﺍﻣﻴﻚ ﺍﺯﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ‪ :‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Reverse‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ B= 40Cm A= 80Cm‬ﻭ ‪ C=20Cm‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪–0.040‬‬
‫=‪a‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ )ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ( ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ a/2‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ 0.020‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭙﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ) ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ b/2‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ( -0.020‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ ά‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ ) ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ( ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ 0.020‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ )ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ( ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ )‪ (٣‬ﻭ )‪ (٤‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮﺑﺎﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

‫‪a−b‬‬ ‫‪B+C‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬

‫( ‪IB = +‬‬ ‫(* )‬ ‫‪)+‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪a −b‬‬ ‫‪A+ B+C‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫( ‪OB= +‬‬ ‫(*)‬ ‫‪)+‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺪﺩﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‪:‬‬

‫)‪0.020−(−0.040‬‬ ‫‪40 + 20‬‬ ‫‪0.040‬‬

‫‪IB= + ( −‬‬ ‫(* )‬ ‫‪)+‬‬ ‫‪=+0.030+0.010=+0.040‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪− 0.020 − ( −0.040‬‬ ‫‪80 + 40 + 20‬‬ ‫‪0.040‬‬
‫( ‪OB = +‬‬ ‫()‬ ‫‪)+‬‬ ‫‪=+ 0.070+ 0.010 =+ 0.080‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻬﻞ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺷﻴﻤﺰﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﻭﻫﺸﺘﺎﺩﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ‪-‬ﺻﻔﺮﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ )ﺍﺯ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ( ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ +‬ﻳﺎ – ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ O‬ﺩﺭﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ) ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ (O‬ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ )ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ)ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﻛﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ)ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺪﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫)ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ( ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ‪ IB‬ﻭ ‪ OB‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻴﻤﺰﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ) ‪ (C‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Reverse‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ ) ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ( ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ( ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ )‪ ( a٦‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٦‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ )‪ (b١٢‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ )‪ (٤) (٣‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮ ) ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ” ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪ )ﭼﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ( ﺍﺯ ﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ IB‬ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﮔﺮﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﺑﺎﻳﺪﺷﻴﻤﺰﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ” ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ) ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ( ١٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ (٦‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Reverse‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺫﻳ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪٥٨‬‬
 ‫‪a−b B‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫( ‪IB =±‬‬ ‫‪) ±‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪a −b‬‬ ‫‪A+ B‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫(‪OB =±‬‬ ‫()‬ ‫‪) ±‬‬
‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎ ﻝ‪:‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺭﺍﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻭﺍﺯﻗﺪﺭﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪a−b‬‬ ‫‪B a‬‬

‫( ‪OB=+‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪+‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪C 2‬‬
‫‪a−b‬‬ ‫‪A+ B a‬‬
‫( ‪OB = +‬‬ ‫( )‬ ‫‪)+‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺪﺩﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻴﺮﺳﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫)‪− 0.040 − (−0.020‬‬ ‫‪40 0.040‬‬

‫‪IB= +‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪+‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪− 0.040 − (−0.020‬‬ ‫‪80 + 40 0.040‬‬
‫‪OB= +‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪+‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪IB= + 0.010 * 2 + 0.020 = +0.040‬‬

‫‪OB= +0.010 * 6 + 0.020 = + 0.080‬‬

‫‪٥٩‬‬
 ‫ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﺍﮔﺮﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪a−b‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎﻛﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ)ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎ(ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺣﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪:‬‬

‫)‪− 0.040 − (−0.020‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬

‫*‬ ‫‪= 0.040‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬

‫‪ 0.040‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻛﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ‪Angularity‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻞ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Reverse‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ) ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺺ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻤﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻼ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ (‪..‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ)ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﻚ ﺑﻮﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ( ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻣﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ)ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻢ(ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻏﺬﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺍ ﻓﻘﻲ)ﺧﻂ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ( ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ‬

‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮕﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ) ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ( ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯﺫﻛﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻳﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ)ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪٦‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ‪ ( a12‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪١٢‬ﺻﻔﺮﻭﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪٦‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ) ‪( b٦‬ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ( ﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺭ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ )ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ( ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻮﺛﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬ﺍﮔﺮﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ‪Reverse‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪a(12)=+0.020‬‬ ‫‪b(6)=+0.010‬‬

‫‪٦١‬‬
 ‫‪F=34Cm‬‬ ‫‪E=70Cm‬‬ ‫‪C=50Cm‬‬ ‫‪B=36Cm‬‬ ‫‪A=50Cm‬‬

‫ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭﻋﻘﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﺑﺮﺍﻱ‪:‬‬
‫‪-١‬ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫‪-٢‬ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻥ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭﻟﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ 0.010‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ)ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻭﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻭﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ 0.005‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻭﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭﻋﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﺑﺎ‬
‫‪0.014‬ﻭ‪ 0.019‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 0.014‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ‪0.019‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻛﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪0.002‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺷﻴﻤﺰﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﻭ‪0.006‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٢‬‬
٦٣
٦٤
 ‫ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻤﻢ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ‪Alignment‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻳﺎﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ( ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ(ﻭﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ)ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﺎﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ) ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ (ﻳﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻴﻤﺰﺯﻳﺮﭼﻬﺎﺭﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪Reverse‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪a(12)=+0.030‬‬ ‫‪b(6)= +0.020‬‬

‫ﻭﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪A=50Cm‬‬ ‫‪B=36Cm‬‬ ‫‪C=20Cm‬‬ ‫‪E=64Cm‬‬ ‫‪E=40Cm‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺴﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻤﻢ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺫﻳﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‪:‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‪0.023‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﭽﺸﻴﻤﺰﺍ ﺯﺯﻳﺮﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﻭ‪0.035‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻛﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ‪:‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‪0.004‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ‪0.014‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ‪:‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻤﻢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻤﭗ‬
‫ﻭﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ)ﺧﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ(ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻭﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﺍﺯ ﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻳﺮﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ 0.004‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﭘﻤﭗ ‪0.007‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ)ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ(ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﺎﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﭘﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺩﻋﺎ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٦‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ” ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﺱ ﻭ‬
‫‪ checker‬ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Alignment‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻋﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻞ ﻭﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ٧٢‬ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Metastream‬ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ‪ Single‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ) ‪( Parallel Misalignment‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Double‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 0.008‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٧٤‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ‪ Gear Coupling‬ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ‪ Flexibility‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﻱ ‪ T‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ High Tension‬ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻟﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ‪ Parallel Misaligment‬ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ”ﺣﺪ ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺧﻤﻴﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﮔﺎﻫﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺘﻲ ‪ Flexibility‬ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻧﻴﺰ‬

‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻤﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺟﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮔﺮﻡ ) ‪ ( Hot Align‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ Alignment‬ﭼﻚ ﻭﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻥ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻤﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﻌﺎﺷﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﭘﻤﭗ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪ Alignment‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪-١‬ﺭﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٢‬ﻟﻘﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )‪(Soft foot‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٣‬ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﻭﺍﻧﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺏ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٤‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ )‪(Base Plate‬ﻭﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﻧﺴﻴﻮﻥ)ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﻭﺕ ﻳﺎﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫‪-٥‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﻧﺴﻴﻮﻥ ﻳﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٦‬ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﻠﺮﻧﺲ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻐﺰﺷﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٧‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﺛﺮ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﺷﻴﻤﺰ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‪Lubrication‬ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٨‬ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪-٩‬ﻧﺸﺴﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬

‫‪٦٨‬‬
 ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‪٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪Center Mount‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺰﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻭﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﺷﻮﺩﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ” ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺣﺪﺱ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺯﺍﺀ ﻫﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٨٠-٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ” ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ)ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ( ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻧﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ” ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻫﻮﺯﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ )ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮔﺮﻡ( ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﺍﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻲ ) ‪ ( Proximity Probe‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Hot Align -١‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎ” ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩﻭﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺟﻨﺲ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ )‪ ( Permalign‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﺩﻗﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ‪ Alarm‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ Shut Down‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٠‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )‪(Optalign‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 0.01‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻴﺰ )‪(Sag‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻭﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ )‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﻮﺩ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ( ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺯ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺗﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻼ” ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ” ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺯ ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺮﺗﻮﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ ‪ ٦‬ﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ) ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺘﺮ ( ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 0.001‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺷﻌﺔ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ )ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻻﻳﻦ ﭼﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻴﺰﺭﻱ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪) ١٢‬ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ( ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)ﺻﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ( ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ ‪ ٦‬ﻭ ‪٩‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ -٦‬ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ‬
‫‪ -٧‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Move‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬

‫‪٧٢‬‬
٧٣
٧٤
٧٥
٧٦
 ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪٧٧‬‬
٧٨
٧٩
٨٠
٨١
٨٢
٨٣
٨٤
٨٥